Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsMisc ElectronicsCasio CTK-7000 (Arabic)

CTK7000/WK7500AR1B

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﻞﺒﻘﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻊﺟﺮﻤﻛ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻴﻤﺟ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻆﻓﺎﺣ ﻚﻠﻀﻓ ﻦﻣ

ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﺇ

ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﺇ” ﻞﺼﻔﻨﻤﻟﺍ ءﺰﺠﻟﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺗ ،ﺢﻴﺗﺎﻔﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﺣﻮﻟ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺇ ﺔﻟﻭﺎﺤﻣ ﻞﺒﻗ

.“ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ

MA1011-B Printed in China

CTK7000/WK7500AR1B

.ﺎﻴﻧﺎﻤﻟﺃ ﻰﻓ ﺔﻴﺌﻴﺒﻟﺍ ﺔﻳﺎﻤﺤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺘﻟﺍ ﻥﻮﻧﺎﻗ ﻰﻟﺇ ﺮﻴﺸﺗ ﺔﻳﺮﺋﺍﺪﻟﺍ ﺔﻣﻼﻌﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ

Summary of content (167 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1011-B Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪CTK7000/WK7500AR1B‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.
PAGE 2
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﺎً ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-4 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ‪AR-36 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪AR-6 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪AR-7 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪AR-7 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪AR-7 ........................ “Please Wait‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪AR-8 ......................................
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-102 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‪AR-148 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-102 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-103 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻬﻞ( ‪AR-112..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ( ‪AR-113................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ .CTK-7000/WK-7500 ‫ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻆ ”ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬،‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ .‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬$ ‫ ﻭ‬# ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ # EDIT ،SONG SEQUENCER ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ‬R-13 (FUNCTION) ‫ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬: # .
PAGE 7
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4 5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-9 (CARD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ JEITA) AC‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪AD-A12150LW :‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D-‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻛﺴﻴﺮﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ ،CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬ ‫)‪ (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪L-4‬‬ ‫‪R-1 – R-12‬‬ ‫‪L-1‬‬ ‫‪L-2‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-19‬‬ ‫‪R-20‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ )‪ L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ MIN‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-11‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-1 (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-4‬‬ ‫)‪ ،([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ .TONE ١٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪ 001‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-19‬‬ ‫‪R-20‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪ (UPPER 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪ (LOWER‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ @ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-19 (SPLIT‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.(UPPER 1‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻣﻌﺎً‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-10 (METRONOME‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ TEMPO‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪TEMPO‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-12 (TAP‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ (S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻨﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ ﻳﺨﻔﻀﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (B‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪-‬ﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺰﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-21‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.ARPEGGIATOR‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪C-4‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪L-4 - L-9‬‬ ‫‪L-11‬‬ ‫‪L-12‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫‪R-18‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺇﻳﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻫﺐ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ‪CASIO Chord‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-17‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.WK-7500‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ L-13‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.١٢‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬ ‫)‪.(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪.HARMONIZE‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪.T-8 (MIC IN‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ .“Chorus/DSP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DSP‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ،(DSP‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻼﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“DSP Disable‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“on‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus/DSP‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“DSP‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬ ‫)‪ (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-160‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻢ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪.DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ .DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-157‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪DSP RevSend‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ‪(DSP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ‪ DSP -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺰء‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪D-1‬‬ ‫)‪ ،D-2 (GROUP A/B) ،(PART/COMMON‬ﻭ ‪D-3‬‬ ‫)‪ ،(1-8/9-16‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ )‪ D-4 (1/9/EXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪D-12‬‬ ‫)‪ .(MASTER‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ )‪ D-4 (1/9/EXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ D-12 (MASTER‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪D-2 ،D-1 (PART/COMMON‬‬ ‫)‪ ،(GROUP A/B‬ﻭ )‪ D-3 (1-8/9-16‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ )‪ D-4 (1/9/EXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪.D-11 (8/16‬‬ ‫‪D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12‬‬ ‫‪D-8‬‬ ‫‪D-7‬‬ ‫‪D-6‬‬ ‫‪D-5‬‬ ‫‪D-4‬‬ ‫‪D-1 D-2 D-3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ )‪ D04 (1/9/EXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪:D-11 (8/16‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-163‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪R-13‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫”‪.“Initialize‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MASTER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MASTER‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪Volume‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MIC/INST‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MIC/INST‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭ )‪.T-8 (MIC IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪Part‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬ ‫‪Volume‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪*(Mic/Inst‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.(oFF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪*on ،oFF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *80‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪Pan‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬ ‫‪DSP Line‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻂ ‪(Mic/Inst DSP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.B16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪TONE‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 ([A] PIANO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪R-12‬‬ ‫)‪ ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN‬ﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L:100‬‬ ‫‪Part‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-8‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻴﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) L‬ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-52‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺒﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ K:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ K:100‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-11‬‬ ‫)‪ .([L] USER TONES‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-14‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*(‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪AttackTime‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪.“DSP Type‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪DSP RevSend‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ‪(DSP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ‪.DSP -‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬ ‫‪Mod Setting‬‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ DSP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.S-2 (MODULATION‬‬ ‫‪DSP ،*Vib‬‬ ‫‪Mod Depth‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-8‬‬ ‫‪R-12‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪D-4 – D-12‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺧﻠﻂ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ .
PAGE 52
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ )'‪ D-4 (16‬ﺇﻟﻰ )'‪D-12 (1‬‬ ‫ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-17‬‬ ‫)‪.(MENU‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ L:051‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ L:100‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻏﻦ ﻗﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ '‪ FT16‬ﺇﻟﻰ '‪FT1‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻦ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ '‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ '‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ“ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ '‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ '‪.(1‬‬ ‫‪Perc.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪R-1 R-12‬‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪L-4 L-9‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-4 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-18‬‬ ‫)‪ (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪L-4‬‬ ‫)‪ ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬ ‫ﻛﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ F:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ F:050‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-9‬‬ ‫)‪ .([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-54‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ”‪ “Store‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ”‪) “Timing‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-58‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Half‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ‪3/4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 3/4‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪.6/8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪ “Half‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”‪ “3/4‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ 3/4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 4/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-54‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-62‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-62‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪R-1 (5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫)‪R-2 (1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫)‪R-3 (2‬‬ ‫‪ ٢/١‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪R-7 (6‬‬ ‫‪ ٤/١‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪R-8 (7‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-8 (7‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬ ‫)‪(Insert Measure‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-62‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪L-1‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-11 C-13 C-15 C-17‬‬ ‫‪C-10 C-12 C-14 C-16‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-163‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪C-5 C-6 C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-19‬‬ ‫‪R-20‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫‪C-11‬‬ ‫‪C-14‬‬ ‫‪C-10 C-12 C-13‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ﻭ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩﺗﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ EASY REC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (e‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-70‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-54‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-68‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬ ‫■ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫– ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A07‬ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B16‬ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :A16‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ :DSP‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬ ‫
PAGE 73
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٧‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺎﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“RecType‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪.(16‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻷﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫”‪.“ClearTrack‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،(C-6 (RECORD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ )ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬ ‫)‪ .((RECORD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻭﻙ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-79‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ* ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-80‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬ ‫)‪.(START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ”‪.“PanelRecord‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬ ‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-14 (NO‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-13 (REPEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-81‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫”‪.“Clear‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“To‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Clear Song‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-81‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-81‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “DeleteMeas.‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 07‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-70‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪،A07‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪.(16‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫• ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-85‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-85‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪“Copy‬‬ ‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Copy Track‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Copy‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬ ‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻮﺭﺍُ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‪” .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ“ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫■ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﻭ ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-88‬‬ ‫• ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪TnU1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪UPPER 1‬‬ ‫]‪[Tone_U1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪TnU2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪UPPER 2‬‬ ‫]‪[Tone_U2‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪TnLo‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪LOWER‬‬ ‫]‪[Tone_Lo‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪TnHm‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫]‪[Tone_Hm‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪ROOT
PAGE 92
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬ ‫‪HARM‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫]‪[AcmpVol‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪127 - 000‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫]‪[AcmpScl‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬ ‫‪oFF ،on‬‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬ ‫‪HARM‬‬ ‫‪Ft.
PAGE 93
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫)‪(View Select‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-87‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ”‪.“ViewSelect‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“View Select‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “Delete‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-91‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬ ‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-91‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻛﺤﺪﺙ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-12 (COPY‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Copy‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-80‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-91‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-80‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-91‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-91‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺃﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .AR-98‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫”‪ “GatetimeMod.‬ﺑﺪ ًﻻ ﻣﻦ ”‪.“VelocityMod.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-87‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Beat‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-11 (INSERT‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-91‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 (5‬ﺇﻟﻰ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-7 (6‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ R-10 (,‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-94‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪C-4‬‬ ‫‪L-9‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫‪C-10‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫‪Fix Data‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪Recorded Data‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ(‬ ‫‪Empty‬‬ ‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫■ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ INTRO‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-13 (INTRO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬ ‫)‪ (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ ،INTRO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (INTRO‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ NORMAL‬ﻭ ‪ ،NORMAL FILL-IN‬ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬ ‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ‪ VARIATION‬ﻭ ‪VARIATION‬‬ ‫‪.FILL-IN‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )‪(Rec Menu‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬ ‫)‪.(RECORD‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-104‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫)‪) “(Rec Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬ ‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬ ‫)‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-111‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪S-2‬‬ ‫)‪ (MODULATION‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬ ‫)‪ .
PAGE 112
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-104‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-120‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻬﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬ ‫)‪ (START/STOP‬ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ]‪ [RHYTHM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،EASY EDIT‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫”‪) “Bend‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Mod‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ( ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ “VALU‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء(‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-117‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ”‪) “PartPara‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫■ ‪) Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺟﺬﺭ ‪ ،C‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(*‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ C‬ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫■ ‪) BreakPoint‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y, u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪R-14 (–, +‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ENDING‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “ElementEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“ElementEdit‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-9‬‬ ‫‪C-5‬‬ ‫‪C-3‬‬ ‫‪C-2‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-121‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪CD‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-123‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-54‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-123‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪UPPER 1،‬‬ ‫‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭ ‪ LOWER‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .
PAGE 128
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬ ‫■ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬ ‫)‪ (PLAY/STOP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-126‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ?‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-2 (AUDIO PLAY‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 005‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-18‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-131‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 133
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪) ArpegSpeed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-23‬‬ ‫‪8 ،6 ،4S ،*4 ،3 ،2S ،2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫”‪ ،“4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫‪) KeyboardCh‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ”ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-36‬‬ ‫‪) AccompVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪A09‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .(A16‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(A03‬‬ ‫‪000 - 115* - 127‬‬ ‫‪) SongVol.
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪) AutoPower‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-13‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ )‪ (*on‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ )‪ .(oFF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-4‬‬ ‫)‪ ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “General‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “Initialize‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-9‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎّ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﻲء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲءﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪.“CardFormat‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ )ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.١*“Xxxx Save‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ SMF‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ ١٦) SMF 0‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ A16‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪SMF‬‬ ‫‪ 01CH‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،16CH‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎً‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ SMF 01CH‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16CH‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬ ‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-137‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-9‬‬ ‫‪L-9‬‬ ‫‪L-8‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 0 SMF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫)‪.(MID‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪ ،MP3 ،WAV‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.
PAGE 144
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-147‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ‪ .
PAGE 149
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫‪Format‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪Card Full‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Card R/W‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪No Card‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪Memory Full‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﺰء‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺍﺳﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 152
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪CTK-7000 / WK-7500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٦١ :CTK-7000‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٧٦ :WK-7500‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ٦٤‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ٢١ ،‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪٨٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ١٠٠‬ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ٥٠‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻀﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﺯﻭ
PAGE 154
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ‪ ،SMF‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪L/MONO ،Line Out R‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪Inst In‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪TYPE B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪء‪
PAGE 155
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺃءﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬ ‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .(AR-32 ‫“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬DSP ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺳﻢ‬،DSP ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ“ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬.(AR-156 ‫“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ”ﻧﻮﻉ“ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬٤٦ ‫ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬DSP ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ .
PAGE 157
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬AR-33 ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ‬.‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬DSP ‫ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬DSP ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬DSP ‫ ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬DSP ‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬AR-44 ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ،‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ‬.DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬٤٦ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬١٥ ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬،DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬١٤ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬٠١ ‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ .
PAGE 158
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪Wah :01‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ “wah‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Flanger :08‬‬ ‫‪Reflection :11‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻰ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ LFO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪: ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ .‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Lo-Fi :14‬‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Lo-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺥ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪ Fingered 3‬ﻭ ‪Full Range‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Fingered 1‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪(A#)/Bb‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪(G#)/Ab‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‬MIDI ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ .
PAGE 164
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-66‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-134‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 165
Models: CTK-7000 / WK-7500 1 - 16 1 - 16 Transmitted 1 - 16 1 - 16 Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Default Changed Function Basic Channel 0 - 127 0 - 127 *1 Mode 3 X 0 - 127 O 9nH v = 1 - 127 X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =** Mode 3 X O 9nH v = 1 - 127 X 9nH v = 0 X O Default Messages Altered X X O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O *2 O O O O O O O O O O O O Filter cutoff Bank select Modulation Data entry LSB, MSB Volume Pan Expression DSP Parameter0 DSP Parameter1 DSP Parameter2 DSP Par
PAGE 166
O 0 - 127 O O O O O O O O O O O *2 O *2 O 0 - 127 O *2 O O O O O O O O O O O *2 O *2 O *2 X X X 74 76 77 78 80 81 82 83 91 93 98, 99 100, 101 X X X X X :True # : Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune O O Program Change System Common : Clock : Commands O O X O O X Aux System Exclusive System Real Time X O X O X X Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Filter cutoff Vibrato rate Vibrato depth Vibrato delay DSP Parameter4 DSP Parameter5 DSP Parameter6 DSP Parameter7 Reverb send Chorus send NRP
PAGE 167
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1011-B Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪CTK7000/WK7500AR1B‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.